LG | D1453WF | Owner's Manual | LG D1453WF Owner's manual

LG D1453WF Owner's manual
OWNER'S MANUAL
OWNER’S MANUAL
DISHWASHER
WASHING MACHINE
Before beginning installation, read these instructions carefully.
This will simplify installation and ensure that the dishwasher is installed
correctly
and safely.
Leave these
instructions
the dishwasher
Please read
this manual
carefully
before near
operating
after
for future
your installation
set and retain
it forreference.
future reference.
­ 1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U)
D
WM0642H* T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U)
D1463W(L,M,
P/No.
P/NO :: MFL66281418
MFL31245123
www.lg.com
CONTENTS
CONTENTS.................................2
Thank you for buying a LG Dishwasher.
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Please read your owner’s manual
carefully, it provides instruction on safe
installation, use and maintenance.
Retain it for future reference.
Important safety instructions............... 3
Read all instructions before use......... 4
Save these instructions....................... 5
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Prepare cupboard opening................. 7
Preparation for electrical wiring ......... 7
Preparing the dishwasher for
installation...........................................8
Installing the dishwasher in
cupboard........................................8
Installation of drain hose..................... 9
Installation of water inlet hose.......... 10
Final check and assembling............. 10
How to level the dishwasher............. 10
Record the model and serial number of
your Dishwasher.
Model No.
Serial No.
Date of Purchase
PARTS NAME........................... 11
FUNCTION OF CONTROL
BUTTON....................................12
BEFORE USING FOR THE
FIRST TIME
Check and find water hardness
level.......................................... 15
Setting up the softening system
level of your dishwasher................... 15
Salt Filling.........................................16
Adding Rinse Aid.............................. 16
OPERATING SEQUENCE....... 26
PROGRAMME..........................27
INFORMATION FOR ENERGY
TEST.........................................17
USER MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS
Keeping the dishwasher............... 28
Filters............................................ 28
Lower Spray Arm.......................... 28
Upper Spray Arm.......................... 28
Water Inlet.................................... 28
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
Daily use load................................... 18
Cutlery Rack..................................... 19
Cutlery Basket.................................. 20
Lower Rack....................................... 20
Upper Rack....................................... 21
Adding Detergent.............................. 23
Refilling.............................................24
Drying...............................................25
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
Before calling for service.................. 29
SPECIFICATION ......................32
2
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS AND EXPLANATION OF THE INSTALLATION
BEFORE USE
WARNING
For your safety, the information in this manual must be followed to minimize the risk of fire or
explosion, electric shock, or to prevent property damage, injury to persons, or death.
Your Safety and the safety of others are very important.
We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance.
Always read and obey all safety messages.
This is the safety alert symbol.
This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others.
All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word DANGER,
WARNING or CAUTION.
These words mean:
DANGER
You will be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions.
WARNING
You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions.
CAUTION
You may be slightly injured or cause damage to the product,if you do not follow instructions.
All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance
of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed.
3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before use
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons when using the washer, follow
basic precautions, including the following:
• Please read this manual carefully
before using the dishwasher for the
first time.
• This manual contains very important notes
regarding the installation, use and
maintenance of your dishwasher.
• The manufacturer can not be responsible
for problems caused by ignoring these
safety and caution instructions.
• This dishwasher is designed for normal
household use.
• Do not use the dishwasher for
industrial and commercial use, or other
purpose.
• The appliance is not intended for use
by young children or infirm persons
without supervision.
• Check packaging and dishwasher
immediately for signs of transport
damage. If the appliance is damaged,
do not put it into use but contact your
supplier without delay.
• This appliance is intended to be used in
household and similar applications such
as;
-S
taff kitchen areas in shops, offices and
other working environments;
- Farm houses;
-B
y clients in hotels, motels and other
residential type environments;
- Bed and breakfast type environments.
• If this product is used for commercial
purpose, it is not warranted.
(Example: Public places such as
restaurant, lodging house, training center,
dormitory)
If the product is installed outside the
normal service area, any cost of
transportation involved in the repair of the
product, or the replacement of a defective
part, shall be borne by the owner.
During installation
• Electrical connection must be in
accordance with the rating label.
• Electrical safety is only guaranteed when
the earth system of your house is in
accordance with the related local
regulations. (Do not use an extension
cable or cord.)
• If the hot water exceeds 65ºC, adjust the
water heater setting. If the hot water
temperature can not be maintained below
65ºC, the dishwasher must be connected
to cold water.
• If power supply cord is damaged, it must
only be replaced by the manufacturer or
its service agent or a similar qualified
person in order to avoid a hazard.
• This appliance must be positioned so that
the plug is accessible.
• The appliance is to be connected to the
water mains using new hose-sets and that
old hose-sets should not be reused.
During use
• Only suitable household utensils
should be placed in the dishwasher.
(Please avoid utensils; that are nonheat-resistant, metal decorated, etc.)
4
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before use
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons when using the washer, follow
basic precautions, including the following:
• Do not use any kinds of solvent in your
dishwasher. They may cause an
explosion or fire.
• Do not spray water on the appliance.
It may cause the failure of electric parts
or electric shock.
• Do not push down or sit on the inner
door when the door is opened. It may
cause the deformation or failure of your
dishwasher.
• Do not use the detergent for hand
washing.
The detergent for dishwasher should
be used for normal operation.
• This appliance is fitted with a safety
function that automatically stops the
operation of the dishwasher when it is
exposed to heavy disturbance on its
mains.
•D
ishwasher detergents are strongly
alkaline.They can be extremely dangerous
if swallowed.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes and
keep children away from the
dishwasher when the door is open.
Check that the detergent receptacle is
empty after completion of the wash cycle.
Child Safety
•D
o not allow children to operate the
dishwasher.
• Young children should be supervised
to ensure that they do not play with the
appliance.
• Controls may be locked using Child Lock
mode to prevent all the settings from being
changed by a child.
• Keep children away from detergents
and rinse-aids.
A
ll batteries (whether installed or attached) should not be exposed to excess heat like
sunlight or similar source.
Save these instructions
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This appliance must be grounded. In the event of malfunction or breakdown, grounding will
reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current.
This appliance is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and
grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed
and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinance.
• Do not use an adapter this will defeat the grounding plug.
• If you don’t have the proper outlet, consult an electrician.
5
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in electric shock.
Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the appliance
is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the appliance - if it does not fit the
outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
Disposal of your old appliance
1. When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is attached to a product it
means the product is covered by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
2. All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately
from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities
appointed by the government or the local authorities.
3. The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance,
please contact your city office, waste disposal service or the shop
where you purchased the product.
CAUTION
CAUTION concerning the Power cord
• Most appliances recommend they be placed upon a dedicated circuit; that is, a single
outlet circuit which powers only that appliance and has no additional outlets or branch
circuits. Check the specification page of this owner's manual to be certain.
• Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded wall outlets, loose or damaged wall outlets,
extension cords, frayed power cords, or damaged or cracked wire insulation are
dangerous. Any of these conditions could result in an electric shock or fire.
• Periodically examine the cord of your appliance, and if its appearance indicates
damage or deterioration, unplug it, discontinue use of the appliance, and have the cord
replaced with an exact replacement part by an authorized servicer.
• Protect the power cord from physical or mechanical abuse, such as being twisted,
kinked, pinched, closed in a door, or walked upon. Pay particular attention to plugs, wall
outlets, and the point where the cord exits the appliance.
If the appliance is supplied from a cord extension set or an electrical portable outlet device,
the cord extension set on electrical portable outlet device must be positioned so that it is
not subject to splashing or ingress of moisture.
CAUTION
The instructions shall state the substance of the following :
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they
have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person
responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
6
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
••A qualified electrician/plumber or competent person should carry out any electrical/
plumbing work required to install this appliance.
Prepare cupboard opening
Preparation for electrical wiring
CAUTION
1. This dishwasher is designed to fit the size
shown as below.
••For personal safety, remove house
fuse or open circuit breaker before
installation.
••Do not use an extension cord or
adapter plug with this appliance.
Electrical and earthing connections must
comply with the national electrical code/
provincial and municipal code and/or
other local codes.
2. Select
a location as close to sink as possible
for ease of connection to the water and drain
pipes.
3. To ensure good drainage, the dishwasher
should not be installed more than 3 meters
away from the sink.
4. I f dishwasher is installed in a corner, a
minimum of 5cm of space is required
between the washer and an adjacent cabinet
or wall.
1. This appliance must be supplied with
correct rating voltage and hertz as shown on
instruction manual, and connected to an
individual, properly earthed branch circuit,
protected by a minimum 15 amp circuit
breaker or time delay fuse.
Wiring must be 2 wires with Earth.
2. The power plug must be in a accessible
location adjacent to and not behind the
dishwasher and within 1.2 meters of the
dishwasher side.(See page 9 Fig.A)
3. The power plug must be correctly earthed, if
in doubt, have it checked by a qualified
Electrician. No other appliance should be
connected to the same plug outlet by a
double adapter or similar plug.
Unit:mm
Dangerous voltage
CAUTION
To indicate hazards arising
from dangerous voltages.
Note- in case of an application
warning sign, the rules
according to ISO 3864 should
be adhered to.
••Any bare wood surrounding the
dishwasher should be sealed with a
waterproof paint or sealant to prevent
swelling.
7
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
I nstalling the dishwasher in
cupboard
reparing the dishwasher for
P
installation
1. Lay the dishwasher on its back.
1. Before sliding the dishwasher into the
cupboard opening, all necessary height
and balancing adjustments should be
made using a spanner.
2. Adjust the legs to the required height
as shown in below figure.
2. Slide the dishwasher into the cabinet,
opening carefully. Make sure that the
drain hose inside the cabinet is not kinked
or stretched.
Adjust
leg
CAUTION
••If the height of the cupboard is below
850mm, you should remove the top table
by unscrewing the 2 screws.
(Two from rear)
8
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Installation of drain hose
1. If the end of drain hose does not fit to the
drain line, use a rubber connector(not
supplied) that is resistant to heat and
detergent.
hen the drain hose is connected to a
W
separate standpipe, it is essential that an
airtight connection be made.
Refer to Fig.B
2. This should be available from a plumbing
shop or DIY merchants.
3. There are two typical connections as shown
in Figure A, B.
The S trap spigot must be drilled out cleanly
and free of obstruction to its maximum
internal diameter, if used for drainage.
To prevent siphoning, one of the following
methods must be used:
Fig. B : Drainage connection - stand pipe.
hen the drain hose is connected to a sink
W
S trap or waste disposal unit, the hose must
be looped up to the underside of the bench
top and secured.
Drain hose Extension
Extend drain hose as shown below.
Fig. A
CAUTION
••When you connect or extend drain hose,
make sure that drain hose is not
kinked.
(Bends should have a 40 mm radius.)
9
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Installation of water inlet hose
How to level the dishwasher
After installing the dishwasher, you may notice a
slight sticking of the door to the dishwasher,
when you open or close the door. If this does
happen you need to adjust the level of the
dishwasher.
Connect the water supply hose to the water tap.
(Fig. A)
Some models consist of an inlet valve and hose.
(Fig. B)
After connecting the inlet hose to the tap, turn on
the tap to flush out foreign substances (dirt, sand
or sawdust) in the water lines. Let water drain
into a bucket, and check the water temperature.
Connect the supply hose to the water inlet valve.
Case 1. In case the door is slanted to the right
Fig. C
Fig. A
• If the door slants to the right, see fig. C and
follow these instructions:
1) Unscrew(counter-clockwise) the left leg of
the back side and correct the level.
2) Check the opening of door and repeat if
necessary until the door opens and closes
properly.
• When the product is correctly leveled, there
should be no slant, stickiness or friction sound.
Fig. B
• This dishwasher may be fed with either hot or
cold water. If the water can not be maintained
below 65ºC, the dishwasher must be connected
to cold water.
• When connecting, you may use sealant tape or
sealing compound to avoid water leaks.
• Make sure that the line is not kinked or sharply
bent.
• It is recommended that the new inlet hose be
used and not the existing or old hose.
Water tap
Case 2. In case the door is slanted to the left
Final check and assembling
1. S
ecurely hand tighten supply hose to the
water supply.
Plug the power supply cord into an earthed
electrical point and switch on.
Fig. D
2. After installing and prior to using the
dishwasher with crockery, we recommend that
you use the dishwasher on Quick mode to
rinse through. At this stage it is useful to
ensure that there are no operating problems or
water leaks.
When the dishwasher is used for the first time,
there may be a loud noise, if this happens,
turn off the power and restart the dishwasher.
• If the door slants to the left, see fig. D and
follow these instructions:
1) Check the opening of door if there still
remains sticky or friction sound.
2) Check the opening of door and repeat if
necessary until the door opens and closes
properly.
• When the product is correctly leveled, there
should be no slant, stickiness or friction sound.
10
PARTS NAME
11. Upper Rack
12. Cutlery Basket
13. Detergent And Rinse Aid Dispenser
14. Vapor Vent Cover
15. Upper Spray Arm
16. Lower Spray Arm
17. Filter ASM
18. Lower Rack
19. Salt Container Cap
20. Cutlery Rack
1. Control Panel
2. Door Handle
3. Front Cover
4. Lower Cover
5. Display Window
6. Power Button
7. Drain Hose
8. Inlet Hose
9. Power Cord
10. Adjustable Leg
Accessory
Funnel
※ The appearance and specifications may vary without notice.
11
FUNCTION OF CONTROL BUTTON
12
13
FUNCTION OF CONTROL BUTTON
① Programme
•Press the cycle that corresponds to your desired wash cycle.
② Rinse
•Repeated pressing of the Spray and Half Load button will select Extra Hot, Rinse+, Extra Hot & Rinse+.
) function, the operating temperature will be up to 80℃.
•If you select the Extra Hot(
(Eco, Auto, Care, Dual Spray)
•When you select Rinse+( ) an additional rinse cycle is added.
③ Child Lock ( )
•Used to lock or unlock the control buttons to prevent all the settings from being changed by a child.
•To activate or release the Child Lock function, press the Child Lock button for 3 seconds while the dishwasher is
in operation.
•All controls will be disabled except the Child Lock and Power buttons.
•Turning off the dishwasher will not reset the Child Lock function. You must release the Child Lock before you can
operate the dishwasher.
④ Spray
•With each press, the level of water jet is changed to Soft (
(Only Care and Dual Spray)
), Medium(
) and Strong(
) in a sequence.
⑤ Half load
•In case of small load, use upper or lower rack only to save energy.
) or Lower(
) rack only. (Except Quick & Dry)
•With each press, select Upper(
•In case you don’t select this button, the machine always works vario washing, which operates upper and lower spray
arm alternately.
⑥ Delay Start
•If you want to delay the start of selected programme, press this button.
•Pressing this button will increase time by 1 hour.
•The delay start time can be adjusted from 1 hour to 19 hours.
⑦ Power
•For operating, press this button first for power on.
•After operating, this button automatically switches off for safety and energy saving.
•In case of irregular surge disturbance to the machine, the power may be automatically turned off for safety.
⑧ Indicator
•Child Lock.
•Refill with special salt.
•Refill with rinse aid.
• UV
⑨ Time Left
•Before starting, the display window shows the running time of the selected programme.
•After starting, the display window shows the remaining time.
•If the dishwasher has a trouble, the trouble type is displayed. (OE, FE, IE, EI, HE, LE, tE)
•If these error letters are displayed, please refer to the trouble shooting guide page 30 and follow the guide.
⑩ Beep On/Off
•The dishwasher must be switched on.
• The beep on/off function can be set by pressing the Spray and Delay Start button simultaneously for a few seconds.
⑪ UV
•If you want to sterilise the dishes, press Half Load and Delay Start button.
•After drying cycle, steriliser will be performed by UV lamp.
•At this time, St code is displayed in display window.
•When you open the door of dishwasher, UV lamp is turned off.
※ Don’t look at the lamp directly with the naked eye.
14
BEFORE USING FOR THE FIRST TIME
Hardness setting
※ You have to check your water hardness and set the softening system level before
operating your dishwasher.
< Water hardness level >
Step 1. Check and find water hardness level
■ Method 1
1) Check the water hardness in your area.
(Your water utility company can help you with this.)
2) Set the softening system level of your dishwasher
according to the water hardness level.
Refer to Step 2.
( L : Softening system level)
*
■ Method 2
)
1) Check your water hardness by using test strip. (
2) Test Procedure
① Immerse all reaction zones of the test strip for approx.1sec (not in running water!).
②S
hake off excess liquid from the strip and wait for 1min.
Then, the green colour of the reaction zone will change to the red-violet.
③ Count the number of red-violet from the strip.
< Water hardness level >
Number of
the areas
(red-violet)
1
2
3
4
Hardness range
°d
°e
°f
mmol/l mg/l
(Ca+Mg) Ca
Water
quality
<7
<9
<12,5
<1,3
<50
soft
7 - 14 9 - 17,5 12,5 - 25 1,3 - 2,5 50 - 100 moderately hard
14 - 21 17,5 - 26 25 - 37 2,5 - 3,8 100 - 150
hard
>21
>26
>37
>3,8
>150
very hard
Softening
system
level
H0, H1
H2, H3
H4, H5
H6, H7
1 °e = 14.25 mg/l CaCO
1 °f = 10 mg/l CaCO
1 °d = 10 mg/l CaO (=1,78 °f) (=1,25 °e)
3) S
et the softening system level of your dishwasher according to the water hardness level.
Refer to Step 2.
Step 2. Setting up the softening system level of your dishwasher
Adjust the water softener to the setting corresponding to the water hardness level in your area.
The water softener has 8 adjustment levels.
The dishwasher is programmed at the factory for a water hardness level of .
This can be checked and altered by using the buttons on the control panel.
1. First, ensure the dishwasher is switched off.
2. Press Half Load and Power button simultaneously and keep them pressed.
3. To change the setting:
Simply press the Half Load button, then the figure will change one by one.
The display will change between
and
.
4. Once the hardness setting is correctly adjusted, press the Delay Start button.
The hardness setting is then saved.
15
BEFORE USING FOR THE FIRST TIME
Step 3. Salt Filling
This model has a water softener to soften hard water.
Please read these notes carefully for correct operation.
In order to provide satisfactory rinsing results, the dishwasher requires soft water, i.e., containing
little or no lime, otherwise water stains will be left behind on the dishes and interior containers.
If the tap water exceeds a certain level of hardness, it must be softened, I.e.,decalcified.
This is achieved by adding a special salt to the water softener inside the dishwasher.
The required amount of salt is set up according to how hard your tap water is.
■F
illing with Salt
Fill the regenerating salt container before starting the washing programme.
Once you have filled with salt you must run the Quick course immediately to remove salt and salt
water around the tub in order to prevent corrosion.
• Remove lower rack and unscrew the cap of salt container.
• Before using your dishwasher for the first time, it is necessary
to Pour 1.5kg of salt and 1 litre of water in to the container.
Otherwise salt refill lamp always turn on during operation.
Use a funnel for ease and clean filling, ensuring that coarse salt
or regenerating salt intended for dishwashers is used.
• After filling, wipe off any spilled salt to seal the cap properly.
• Screw the cap tightly to prevent any suds from penetrating into
the container.
Step 4. Adding Rinse Aid
■F
or filling
To fill the Rinse Aid chamber, push the rinse aid button. Fill the container to the maximum level
with a good quality Rinse Aid, then close the cap.
The Rinse Aid is automatically dispensed during the final rinse cycle.
The dosage is factory set to suit most installations. If, after washing, you notice cloudy spots,
streaks or water marks on your glassware, it may be necessary to increase the setting. To do this,
remove the cap and rotate the indicator arrow to a higher setting then replace the cap . If the glass
is smeared or foam is present on the bottom of the glass or the bottom of the machine, select a
lower setting.
16
INFORMATION FOR ENERGY TEST(EN50242)
3. Upper Rack
■Appliance loaded in accordance with
standard specifications.
• Capacity : 14 place settings
• Comparability course : Eco
• Rinse Aid setting : 4
• Reference cleaner : 35g of detergent onto
the inside surface of the door.
• Height-adjustable Rack-U must be inserted
into the uppermost position.
b
f
a
b
1. Cutlery Basket
b
a
d
g
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c
b
e
Milk
Egg
Margarine
f
b
c
f
Tea
Oat
Meat
Spinach
4. Lower Rack
④
e
d
g
2. Cutlery Rack
⑦
d
d
c
④
d
① ①
② ②
⑤
⑤
1234567
f
① ①
④
d
④
f
Milk
Egg
Margarine
17
d e
Tea
Oat
e
Meat
Spinach
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
Daily use load
1. Cutlery Basket
3. Upper Rack
2. Cutlery Rack
4. Lower Rack
CAUTION
••Do not use the pot and pan with plastic handle.
••Poor washing for smudges of waterproof or long lasting lipsticks on the glass.
18
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
1. Cutlery Rack
For better washing performance, always load
the dishwasher according to the instructions.
The cutlery rack is suitable for flatware and
most cooking or serving utensils.
■ Before loading items into the dishwasher.
•C
lean off large particles of food, in
particular insoluble items such as bones,
pips etc.
• I tems with burnt on food should be soaked
prior to loading in the dishwasher.
■While you load items into the dishwasher.
•L
oad all items with the opening down.
(Make sure that water does not collect in a
deep base.)
•D
eep based items should be placed at an
angle to help water run off and dry
properly.
•M
ake sure that all items do not touch each
other.
Knife, fork and spoon handles should be
positioned between the tines.
■ Take care not to obstruct the rotation of
spray arms.
WARNING
••Be careful when loading and unloading
sharp-edged items. Load sharp knives
with the blade down in order to reduce the
risk of injury.
■ Plastic items do not dry as well as steel or
porcelain items.
NOTE
■Height Adjustable tray
Each side tray can be adjusted independently to
a high or low position to accommodate
different sizes of utensils or cutlery.
Non Dishwasher Safe Items
he combination of high water
T
temperatures and dishwasher detergent
may damage particular items, therefore
we do not recommend using the
dishwasher to wash the following:
Lift it up
Copper or anodised aluminium
Hand painted silver or gold leaf crockery
Wood or bone handled utensils
Iron or non rust proof utensils
Plastic items which are not dishwasher
safe
Expensive one such as silvers and
dishes with golden rings
Fragile item such as crystal glasses
Rotate it front to back
High position
20mm
19
Low position
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
Max. 18cm
■R
emovable Cutlery Rack
The entire cutlery rack can be removed if more
space is needed on the upper rack for larger
items.
The cutlery shouldn’t
be longer than 18cm.
(In this case, use
cutlery rack.)
The basket can be split along its length,
increasing the lower rack’s loading versatility.
NOTE
Always remove cutlery from the rack
before removing the rack.
①
②
②
①
Pull the rack out to the end of the rails, then lift
the front of the rack so the rollers clear the stop
on the end of the rail. The rack can now be
slid forward and removed from the rails.
Slide two baskets in opposite directions, then
pull them apart.
WARNING
••To prevent injuries, place knives and
other utensils with sharp points on the
cutlery rack.
••If you want to load them in the cutlery
basket, place them with the pointed edges
facing downwards.
2. Cutlery Basket
Place forks and spoons in the cutlery basket
with their handles downwards.
3. Lower Rack
The lower rack is suitable for dinner plates,
soup bowls, dishes, pots, pans, lids and even
the grill tray.
For Large utensils, such as whisks, the cover
can be opened by being unhinged.
Take care not to obstruct the rotation of the
spray arm.
Plates should be positioned upright and facing
the centre of the rack and pots, pans and large
dishes must be turned upside down.
20
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
Take care not to obstruct the rotation of the
spray arms.
• E.g.) Loading dishes
Fold up whole tines.
• E.g.) Loading bowls
To make it easier to load larger dishes, the front
row of tines can be folded down.
■H
ow to fold down
Fold down the rear row of each pair of tines.
• E.g.) Loading pots
Fold down whole tines.
4. Upper Rack
Rear
The upper rack is suitable for delicate items
such as, small plates, long cutlery, cups,
glasses and dishwasher safe plastic items.
Front
The front side rows are composed with a pair
of rows of tines.
Each pair can be folded separately to load large
dishes, especially bowls.
To make the space between two tines wider,
fold down the rear row of each pair.
Fold down the back side rows of tines to load
pots.
Plates should be positioned upwards with the
plate bottom facing the front of the rack.
Cups, glasses and bowls must be positioned
upside down.
21
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
Take care not to obstruct the rotation of the
spray arm under the upper rack.
djusting the height of the upper
A
rack
The height of the upper rack can be adjusted
when you load glasses with long stems or tall
crockery items.
• M
ove the upper rack to the lower
position
To make it easier to load larger cups or glasses,
the left side row of tines can be folded down.
For the upper rack’s position, dishes shouldn’t
be larger than 25cm with the upper position,
nor 20cm with the lower position.
Pull up the levers
on either side of
the rack.
• Move to upper position
How to fold down
• Pull up the tine
• Rotate the tine
Lift the rack upward.
There is a 45mm gain in height when the upper
rack is moved to the lower position.
Long stem glassware can be
placed without interference
from the lowered tines.
45mm
After adjusting the rack levels, check that the
spray arms are free to rotate.
The cup racks can be folded up out of the way
for tall crockery items.
WARNING
••Before adjusting, ensure the rack is
empty of all crockery. Otherwise
crockery may get damaged or you may get
injured.
With the lower position of the upper rack,
check if the bottom part of upper rack
including spray arm is not disturbing items
on the lower rack.
••When the upper rack is in the lower
position, push in the upper rack first, and
the lower rack later.
(Pull out the lower rack first, and the upper
rack later.)
22
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
5. Adding Detergent
• Detergent must be put into the detergent
chamber before starting every programme.
• Please follow the manufacturer’s instructions
within the manual, when determining the
correct amount of detergent to use.
• If your dishes are moderately dirty, you may
use slightly less detergent than recommended.
• Chambers hold up to 50g including pre-wash
chamber.
• The amount of detergent required depends on
the programme. Please refer to the guide table.
PROGRAMME
Quick & Dry
Quick
Eco
Auto
Care
Dual Spray
Push button to open
AMOUNT OF DETERGENT
Pre-wash
(Onto the door)
5g
5g
5g
Main-wash
(Dispenser)
20g
10g
35g
30g
20g
30g
Place proper detergent into this compartment
• The detergent is dispensed automatically
during the operation.
• The chamber lid remains open after
operation.
NOTE
Detergent Information
When using tablets, place them onto the
inside surface of the door. The use of
some combined detergent/rinse aid
tablets can cause the dispenser to
remain shut during the wash.
••Use only the detergent intended for
household dishwashers. (Ordinary
hand-washing detergent should not be
used, because the foam will interfere
with proper operation.)
••When using some dishwasher tablets,
the dispenser may not open due to their
excessive size.
••If this happens, place the tablet onto
the floor of the tub.
23
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
WARNING
6. R
efilling
••The detergent used is a special
Dishwasher detergent and like all
household chemicals it should be treated
as harmful and kept out of reach of
children.
■ For refilling Rinse Aid
Depending on the dosage setting and the
number of washes, the chamber may need to be
topped up, approximately once a month. The
rinse aid level can be checked by two methods.
• By the indicator window on the dispenser
when the dishwasher door is fully open.
● Black indicates sufficient Rinse Aid
○ Clear indicates Rinse Aid required
••After completion of the wash
programme, the detergent
compartment should be checked and
any remaining detergent removed.
CAUTION
Using combined detergent products
(ex.3 in 1)
••Some products integrated with rinse aid
work best with specific programmes only.
You will obtain optimum rinsing and drying
results by using conventional rinse aids.
••The use of Dishwasher Tablet products
may also cause the soap dispenser to
remain shut, therefore failing to dispense
the soap tablet.
These combined detergent products can
alternatively be placed in the filter prior to
starting the wash cycle.
Please contact the detergent manufacturer
if the drying performance is very poor or
you find white foam, when you use the
combined detergent products.
The rinse aid dial should be set to
minimum when using wash tablets with
built in rinse aid.
Excessive rinse aid can cause foaming at
the end of the wash.
We do not warrant the complaints that are
directly related to the use of these
products. Do not use liquid rinse aid if
using tablets containing a rinse aid agent.
Rinse-Aid Indicator
Adjust Lever (Rinse)
• By the light on the control panel, being lit,
when the dishwasher is working on.
■ D1453**
■ D1463**
When the lamp is lit, it means the rinse
aid is almost empty. Refill the Rinse Aid
chamber as soon as possible.
NOTE
Rinse Aid Information
••Rinse Aid is necessary to remove spots
and streaks of the water from dishes as
well as improved drying. Using the correct
amount will improve wash performance.
However, using too much can produce
excess foam leading to possible water
leaks.
24
HOW TO USE AND OPERATE
7. Drying
■ To assist drying, we recommend that the
door be partially opened after the cycle.
The display will indicate Cd(cool dry) for a
further 60 minutes after the end of the cycle
time. It can be interrupted or terminated by
simply opening the door.
■ The use of rinse aid is recommended for
optimum drying results.
■ Select the Extra Hot option to get better
drying results.
■ For refilling Salt
When the salt container is empty, the salt refill
lamp will automatically turn on during
operation. The salt should be refilled after the
cycle has finished. We recommend the salt refill
should always be carried out, as mentioned on
previous page, prior to starting the next
operation. This will immediately thin and drain
away any excess salt solution.
■ D1453**
■ D1463**
When the lamp is lit, this means that the
salt aid is almost empty. Refill the Salt Aid
chamber as soon as possible.
NOTE
• After filling with salt, it may take a little
while before the indicator light turns off.
• When the control is set to , it is not
necessary to fill up with salt as no salt is
consumed while the dishwasher is
operating. If the control is set between
and , then salt must be added to the
salt container.
WARNING
• Do not pour detergent into the salt
container. This will destroy the water
softener.
25
OPERATING SEQUENCE
the running time of the selected
programme.
After starting, the display window shows
the remaining time.
The time in the display window will start to
decrease minute by minute.
If the door is opened during the programme
a safety device ensures that the machine
stops.
Once the door is re-closed the programme
will start from where it was interrupted.
1. Press the Power button
2. Check there is rinse aid and
salt
The corresponding indicator lights will
illuminate if refilling is required.
3. Open the door and check the
filters
Ensure they are clean and properly
positioned. (See User Maintenance
Instructions)
8. At the end of the washing
programme
End is displayed on the digital display and a
buzzer sounds.
And the dishwasher automatically switches
off for safety and energy saving later.
4. Load the dishes
Remove any excess food.
Pull the lower rack out and arrange the dishes
and cutlery.
Pull the upper rack out and arrange the cups,
glasses, etc.
If you select UV function, the dishwasher
automatically switches off after sterilising
action.
CAUTION
CAUTION
••Do not load the items in upper rack when
the lower rack is pulled out and loaded.
••Empty the lower rack first and then the
upper one; this will avoid water dripping
from the upper rack onto the dishes below.
5. Ensure the spray arms can
freely rotate
WARNING
••In general it is not advisable to open the
door while the machine is working.
••If the door is opened, a safety device
ensures that the machine stops.
••Care must be taken if the door is opened
during the hot phase or immediately after a
programme has finished, as steam may
escape.
6. Measure out detergent
Add the required amount of detergent into the
dispenser and close the lid.
7. Setting and starting the
programme
Press the programme button to select the
desired programme.
After 10 seconds, the machine will start.
If necessary, select the option function
corresponding to the desired programme.
The indicator lights of the programme and all
the phases of the programme will come on.
Before starting, the display window shows
CAUTION
••The door should not be left in the open
position since this could present a tripping
hazard.
26
PROGRAMME
▶Running time may vary according to the water temperature, water pressure and voltage.
▶Running time doesn’t include Cool Dry - 60min.
Programme
WASH
Pre Wash
RINSE
Main Wash
Rinse 1
Rinse 2
Heating
Rinse
Quick & Dry
65℃
Quick
60℃
65℃
Eco
43℃
59℃
Auto
COOL
DRY
70℃
The programme sequence is optimised and adapted in accordance with how dirty the dishes are.
Care
Dual Spray
DRY
45℃
50℃
70℃
60℃
70℃
Quick & Dry
According to the degree of soiling, the
programme automatically adjusts the washing
time and temperature.
As a result, the energy and water consumption is
kept as low as possible. The F ON display means
that the sensor is sensing the status of the
dishwasher.
This programme offers good washing
performance within 60 minutes.
To assist drying, we recommend to open the
door partially when you see the small amount of
wet streaks or drops after the cycle.
Opening the door right after the cycle may set
the High temperature alarm off.
Care
Quick
This cycle adds the gentle power of steam to
boost the cleaning power of the delicate cycle.
The cycle is adequate for effectively cleaning
delicate items like fine china or stemware.
Can use for lightly soiled recently used dishes
and cutlery.
Eco
This programme offers efficient energy and
water consumption for a good washing
performance on a moderately soiled load.
Dual Spray
This cycle washes the upper and lower racks at
different spray intensities. The lower rack is
washed with a strong spray for hard to clean
items, while the upper rack is washed with a
medium spray for more delicate items. This
provides optimum cleaning performance for
mixed loads, including fine china and stemware.
Auto
During the Auto programme, the degree of
soiling in the dishes is determined by the amount
of clouding to the water.
■A
uto Restart
I f the dishwasher is turned off by a power failure, it will restart from the position it stopped at adjusting
accordingly when you press the Power button again.
27
USER MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
To prevent trouble and poor operating, it is important to check filters and spray arms
at regular intervals.
Keeping the dishwasher
Upper Spray Arm
• Pull the upper rack forwards.
• Check that the water jet holes are not blocked.
• If cleaning is required, remove the arm by
unscrewing the nut.
• Clean the spray arm and replace it in the
reverse order.
• If you are not using the dishwasher for a long
time, run a Quick & Dry cycle without detergent.
When the cycle is finished, clean the dishwasher
according to the USER MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS to remove the food debris at
the bottom of the dishwasher and close the door.
Filters
• Remove the lower rack first.
• Turn the mesh filter counterclockwise.
• Take out the mesh filter, upper STS filter and
outer filter.
• We recommend to clean them and run the Quick &
Dry cycle without detergent at least once a week.
• Replace them in the reverse order.
Water Inlet
• A filter is incorporated in the connection of
the valve on the water inlet hose.
If insufficient water flows into the dishwasher,
check that the filter is not blocked.
• Cleaning the filter
- Disconnect the dishwasher
from the mains supply.
Switch off at the mains
socket and remove the plug.
- Turn off the tap.
- Unscrew the inlet hose.
- Remove the filter from
connection.
- Clean the filter in the supply
hose under running water.
- Refit the filter, making sure
it is sitting correctly.
- Reconnect the inlet hose to the tap.
- Turn on the tap.
• If there is a leak, the inlet hose might not be
on securely, or it may have been screwed on at
an angle. Unscrew and reconnect the water
inlet valve correctly.
• Reconnect power supply.
Mesh filter
Outer filter
Upper STS
filter
NOTE
••After each cycle, clean the filter for a better
washing result.
••Before starting, check that the filter is
assembled well. If the filter is not assembled
correctly, you might have a poor cleaning
result.
Lower Spray Arm
• Check that the water jet holes are not blocked.
• If cleaning is required, remove the arm by
pulling up.
• Clean the spray arm and replace it pulling down.
28
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
•If a problem occurs check below to see whether this can be solved.
•In the unlikely event that the problem cannot be rectified, please contact a service engineer.
Before calling for service
Problem
Possible Causes
• Check the plug.
No lights come on when
the power is turned on.
• Plug
is not properly inserted into
the socket.
•F
uses blown or circuit breaker
tripped.
• The electricity from the house was
cut off.
The machine does not
start.
•D
oor is not fully closed.
• The start button is not pressed.
• Close the door.
• Press the start button.
The spray arms do not
rotate smoothly.
• The mounting of the spray arms is
blocked by food particles.
• Clean the holes of the
spray arm.
White deposits are left
on the dishwasher after
washing.
• The amount of detergent or rinseaid set incorrectly.
• The salt container is empty.
• The salt container cap is not
securely screwed on.
• Check the detergent
or rinse-aid.
• Check the salt
container or cap.
Streaks are left on
glassware.
• Too little Rinse-Aid dispensed.
Dry results are not
satisfactory.
• Too little Rinse-Aid dispensed.
Washing results are not
satisfactory.
• Incorrect amount of detergent.
• Utensils incorrectly arranged or
overloaded.
• Filters are clogged.
• Water jet holes of spray arms
blocked.
• Spray arm's rotation obstructed by
utensils.
• Unsuitable programme selected.
29
Solution
• Check the electricity.
• Call for service.
• Fill the rinse-aid.
• Adjust the level of
rinse-aid container.
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
Before calling for service
Problem
Possible Causes
Solution
• The drain hose is kinked.
• The filter is clogged.
• Motor trouble.
(Washing motor or Drain motor)
• Straighten hose(s).
• Clean the filter.
• If you can not solve the
problem, call for
service.
The display shows IE
code.
•W
ater is not supplied.
•W
ater tap is not opened.
•W
ater sensor has trouble.
• Check the water tap.
• If you can not solve the
problem, call for
service.
The display shows EI
code.
(Automatically Drain
pump operated.)
• Water is leaking from the hose
connections.
• Damage to the unit has been
caused by a water leak.
The display shows FE
code. (Automatically
Drain pump operated.)
•E
xcessive water is supplied, which
is more than the normal water level.
• There is a problem with the inlet
valve.
The display shows HE
code.
• The water heater circuit is damaged.
The display shows tE
code.
• Thermistor trouble or very high inlet
water temperature.
The display shows LE
code.
•M
otor trouble.
The display shows OE
code. (Water is not
pumped away.)
30
• Close the water tap
and unplug the power
plug.
• Call for service.
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
•These are not error codes indicating a malfunction.
Before calling for service
Code
Description
The display shows
PF code
This indicates there was a power failure. This function protects
the dishwasher in the event that the power goes out or the power
to the unit is disrupted. When power is returned, and a button is
pushed, this will display for 10 seconds and then go away.
The display shows
Cd code
Cd means Cool-dry. This is an additional drying cycle to assist
drying performance. This cycle runs for a further 60 minutes after
the course has finished. It can be interrupted at any time by
opening the door.
The display shows
CL code
CL means Child-Lock. This function is used to lock or unlock
the control buttons to prevent all the settings from being changed
by a child. It can only be activated during the wash cycle.
The display shows
F code
When the unit is displaying F, the sensor is measuring the
water clarity. After 5 minutes of sensing (except draining and
filling), the unit's display will then show the processing time.
The display shows
numbers between 1 ~ 19
This is not an error code, but indicates the setting of the delay
start. To cancel the function, turn the power off. To change the
course and option, open the door and select another course and
option. Countdown will then continue after door is closed again.
Buzzing sound.
(High Temperature Alarm)
This is not an error. When you open the door right after heating
wash, rinse or dry, buzzing sound would keep on ringing for
safety if the inside is heated.
Odor
If the dishwasher is not used daily, we recommend to run a
Quick cycle once or twice a day until you have a full load.
In case odor still persists, run a vinegar rinse through a Auto
cycle by putting 2cup(500ml) of white vinegar in an upright
measuring cup in the lower rack, without detergent.
We recommend to maintain according to the USER
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.
31
SPECIFICATION
D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F
D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F
D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B
D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B
D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U
D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U
Capacity
14 Place settings
Weight
See rating label
Power Supply
See rating label
Power Consumption
See rating label
Water Feed Pressure
50 ~ 800 kPa
32
MEMO
33
You may also find owner's manual in video version at following link
www.lg.com/steamdishwasher
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫‪WASHING MACHINE‬‬
‫‪OWNER’S MANUAL‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﻬﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ before‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪operating‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪this manual‬‬
‫‪carefully‬‬
‫‪Please read‬‬
‫‪your set and retain it for future reference.‬‬
‫)‪D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U‬‬
‫)‪D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U‬‬
‫‪P/No.: MFL66281418‬‬
‫*‪WM0642H‬‬
‫‪www.lg.com‬‬
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪٢......................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻃﺒﺎﻕ ‪.LG‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺠﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪٤ .....‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﲢﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ ‪٧ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٧ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﲢﻀﻴﺮ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪٨ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ ‪٨ ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‪٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ‪١٠ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪١٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪١٠ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪١١...........................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪١٢..............‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٦.......................‬‬
‫ﺇﻓﺤﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮﺍﳌﺎﺀ ‪١٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪١٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‪١٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‪١٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪٢٧....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ‪٢٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ‪٢٨ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪٢٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪٢٨ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪٢٨ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٧........‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ‪١٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪١٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ ‪٢٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ‪٢٠ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪٢١ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪٢٣ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ‪٢٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪٢٥ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪٢٩ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٣٢................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ﻭﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﻣﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻓﺎﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ »ﺧﻄﺮ« ﺃﻭ‬
‫»ﲢﺬﻳﺮ« ﺃﻭ« ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺹ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻤﹼ ﻤﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﹼ ﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ؛‬
‫ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺟﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ؛‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ؛‬
‫ ﻏﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻭﻏﺮﻑ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺒﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫• ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎﹰ ﳌﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻼ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﲡﻠﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻐﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻗﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﲡﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﲔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ »ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‬
‫)‪ «(Child Lock‬ﳌﻨﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳉﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻮﺍ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺒﺜﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﲟﻘﺒﺲ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﹼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﳌﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃ ﹼﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻴﺔ ‪. EC / ٩٦ / ٢٠٠٢‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺭﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻠﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﳝﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺑﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﲟﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﲟﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﻐﺬﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﺮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﶈﺘﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻘﻮﻕ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻪ ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻪ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﲡﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺴﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻫﺘﻢ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﻤﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺻﺮﺓ )ﲟﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳋﺒﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﲢﺖ ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺒﺜﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ )ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﲢﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﶈﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪٨٧٠-٨٦٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﭭﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ ١٥‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻠﻜﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٫٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٥‬‬‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﲔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺍﻃﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪(٧٥ X ١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻪ – ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺰﻭ‬
‫‪. ٣٨٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﻫﻦ ﺍﳋﺸﺐ ﺍﶈﻴﻂ ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﲟﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﳋﺸﺐ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳋﺰﻥ‬
‫ﲢﻀﻴﺮ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺿﻊ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻬﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﳑﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﺰﺍﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮ ﺑﺮﻏﻴﲔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻴﲔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪ ٨٧٠-٨٦٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪-٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻫﻨﺎﻟﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳕﻮﺫﺟﻴﺘﲔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ ﺍ ﻭ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ s‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻌﺐ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ » ‪ « S‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺎ ﻭﻭﺻﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺏ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ‪ -‬ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺩ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫‪ ٧٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ٧٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ١٠٠٠/‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﻧﺤﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫‪ ٧٧٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ١٠٠٠/‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﳋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ( ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﳋﺮﺩﺍﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ ٠٢-٦١‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻲ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪٠٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃ(‬
‫ﺗﻀﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺏ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺫﻭﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺸﺐ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻉ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪ : ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺝ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻛ ﹼﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺭﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻰ )ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺏ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃ(‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺷﺪ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆ ﹼﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺩ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ »ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪«(Quick‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻴﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛ ﹼﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺭﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻰ )ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺿﺠﻴﺠﺎ ﹰ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫‪.١٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١٥‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫‪.١٧‬‬
‫‪Accessories‬‬
‫‪ .١٨‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ .١٩‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫‪ .٢٠‬ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫‪First filling‬‬
‫‪Refilling‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫)‪D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F(B,U) :‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
١٣
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪)Spray‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ( ﻭ‪ Half Load‬ﹾ‬
‫)ﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ( ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪ ،+‬ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.+‬‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪)Extra Hot‬ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ( )‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪ ( ) +‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﻄﻒ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ) (‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) Child Lock‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Child Lock‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ( ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ( ﻭ‪) Power‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪) Child Lock‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) Child Lock‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺿﺪ ﻋﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ) (‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ) ( ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﹾ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ) ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ) ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ(‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٩‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻣﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺘﻪ ﲟﻠﺢ ﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‪“OE”، “FE”، “IE”، “EI”، “HE”، “LE”، “tE” .‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪)Spray‬ﺍﻟﺮﺵ( ﻭ‪)Delay Start‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Half Load‬ﹾ‬
‫)ﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ( ﻣﻊ ‪) Delay Start‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻮﺩ »‪ «ST‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﺇﻓﺤﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫>ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﲢﻘﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺿﺒﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺇﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫)‪ : * L‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﲢﻘﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻤﺴﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ!(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺀ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﻱ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫>ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ<‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪-‬ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺠﻲ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫‪d°‬‬
‫>‪7‬‬
‫‪14 - 7‬‬
‫‪21 - 14‬‬
‫<‪21‬‬
‫‪e°‬‬
‫‪f°‬‬
‫‪mmol/l‬‬
‫)‪(Ca+Mg‬‬
‫‪mg/l‬‬
‫‪Ca‬‬
‫>‪50‬‬
‫>‪1,3‬‬
‫>‪12,5‬‬
‫>‪9‬‬
‫‪100 - 50 2,5 - 1,3 25 - 12,5 17,5 - 9‬‬
‫‪150 - 100 3,8 - 2,5 37 - 25 26 - 17,5‬‬
‫<‪150‬‬
‫<‪3,8‬‬
‫<‪37‬‬
‫<‪26‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫‪H0, H1‬‬
‫‪H2, H3‬‬
‫‪H4, H5‬‬
‫‪H6, H7‬‬
‫‪1°e = 14.25 mg/l CaCO3‬‬
‫‪1°f = 10 mg/l CaCO3‬‬
‫)‪1°d = 10 mg/l CaO (=1,78°f) (=1,25°e‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬ﻋﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺇﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺴﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ » « ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪ ) Half Load‬ﹾﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ( ﻭ ‪) Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺃﺑﻘﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ) Half Load‬ﹾﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﻤﻞ( ﻭﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﲔ » « ﻭ » «‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪) Delay Start‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﹼﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻤﻌﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺷﻄﻒ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺤﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﱘ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻌﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺀ ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﺴﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﹼ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺣﺔ ﻋﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ »ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ« ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﻮﺽ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺼﺐ ‪١٫٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﺢ ﻭ‪ ١‬ﻟﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﻊ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺁﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻗﻢ ﲟﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺢ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺮﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺷﻄﻒ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺀ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺟﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﻏﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(EN50242‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﰎ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟـ ‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪٤ :‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﻒ‪ ٣٥ :‬ﺟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ U‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺣﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺷﺎﻱ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻓﺎﻥ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﳊﻮﻡ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺎﻧﺦ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺳﻤﻨﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺣﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ b‬ﺷﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ d‬ﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺳﻤﻨﺔ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪d e‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﻓﺎﻥ‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﳊﻮﻡ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺎﻧﺦ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻘﻼﺓ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﲟﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ ﻟﻠﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺳﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﻄﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻬﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ) .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﲡﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﺱ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﲡﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺰﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻋﻖ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻼﺀﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻌﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺤﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﳌﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺨﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺸﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻏﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﻫﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫‪20mm‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ١٨‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٨‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠ ﹰﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺣﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻥ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺳﻠﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻠﲔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻛﲔ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﻋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻀﻬﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘﻼﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﻔﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﺱ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺸﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﻲ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻼﺀﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺯﻭﺝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺻﻔﲔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺯﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺸﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﺱ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻷﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺛﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﻲ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻼﺀﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٤٥‬ﱈ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪45mm‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﳑﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺯﻋﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪(.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺭﻓﻮﻑ ﺍﻷﻛﻮﺍﺏ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺟﻢ ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪Quick & Dry‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪Quick‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪Eco‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ(‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Care‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪Dual Spray‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ( ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ(‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺺ ﻟﻐﺴﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻮﺓ ﺳﺘﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻏﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﻮﺯﻉ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﺎﺹ ﹼ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻒ ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﹰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺘﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻓﻌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ(‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫**‪D1453‬‬
‫**‪D1463‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺇ ﹼﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃ ﹼﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻮ ﹼﻟﺪ ﺭﻏﻮﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ﹰ ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻞﺀ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ‬
‫ﲟﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺢ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫**‪D1453‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ »‪) «Cd‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻑ( ﳌﺪﺓ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫**‪D1463‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ »ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ« ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻓﺮﻍ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﺌﻪ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﳑﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻟﻴﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ » « ﻓﻼ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﳌﻞﺀ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﲔ » « ﻭ‬
‫» « ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻠﻒ ﹼ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ »ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫)‪«(Power‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ End‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺯﻣﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﹼ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻔﺴﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﻤﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﺗﹼﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺭﺗﹼﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺟﲔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺆﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻷﻥ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﹼ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﳝﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﹼ‬
‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺊ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺎﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﺢ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﳊﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﹰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﳌﺎ ﻗﺪ ﳝﺜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ "ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ )‪ (Cool Dry‬ﻭﻫﻮ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪Quick & Dry‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ(‬
‫‪Quick‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪Eco‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ(‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Dual Spray‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٦٥‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٧٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٥‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٤٣‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٩‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫‪Care‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٤٥‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٧٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫‪ ٧٠‬ﹾ ﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻼﺣﻈﲔ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺰﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻸﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳊﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ”‪ “F‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﹰﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﹼ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺑﺨﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻐﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻧﻈﻔﻲ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﻭﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﻔﺎﺓ ‪ STS‬ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺗﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻔﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ STS‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﺄﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻏﺴﻴﻞ ﺳﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺥ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﻭﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻚ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﻈﻒ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﲢﺖ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬‫ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻚ ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻳﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ )ﻓﻴﻮﺯ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ • ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻸ ﲟﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﻏﻲ ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺭﺵ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ »‪.«OE‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ(‬
‫• ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺜﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﶈ ﹼﺮﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ )ﻣﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺸﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺮﻃﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﹼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﻼ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺇﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«IE‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺍﹰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﻼ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺇﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«EI‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺴ ﹼﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«FE‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﹼ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«HE‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﺨﲔ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«tE‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﲟﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ »‪.«LE‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﶈ ﹼﺮﻙ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺃﻛﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ »‪«PF‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ »‪«Cd‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪ “Cd‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ »‪«CL‬‬
‫»‪ «CL‬ﻳﹸﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪) Child-Lock‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻃﻔﻞ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ »‪«F‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ »‪ «F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﳉﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﹸﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﺧﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﻯ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺬﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﲔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﺴﺨﲔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﺎﳋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻴﺎﻟﲔ )‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺮ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F‬‬
‫‪D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)F‬‬
‫‪D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B‬‬
‫‪D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)B‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٩٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٨٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٨٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪D1453W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U‬‬
‫‪D1463W(L,M,T,B,C,D,A)U‬‬
‫‪ ٥٩٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺰ ﹼﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻇﻐﻂ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠~ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٥٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٨٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬
‫‪www.lg.com/steamdishwasher‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising